JP7225139B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine can execute a battle production and a timer production at the same time as a ready-to-win production, and during the battle production, it is possible to further execute a slow motion production that slows down the playback speed of the battle production. There is a thing (for example, see patent document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801

However, in Patent Document 1, if the reproduction speed of the battle effect is slowed down as the slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable.

The game machine of means A is
Performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
sound output means (for example, speaker 8L, 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
light-emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d);
State control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS166, a part that executes step 100IWS173, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-19),
Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
with
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect), A second period after the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is executed period), and a period after the second period, and a third period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 Including the jackpot notification effect execution period and the loss notification effect execution period),
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed (for example, normal progress speed V1) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in an effect mode that progresses at a second speed that is slower than the first speed (for example, a progress speed V2 (slow motion) that is slower than the normal progress speed V1) (for example, , as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect progresses. The portion displayed on the image display device 5 at the speed V2),
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. During the performance second half execution period, the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle shorter than each execution period of the first ready-to-win performance, the second ready-to-win performance, and the third ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period),
The state control means is capable of controlling from the first state to the second state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. part),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 , a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The effect executing means operates the information display related to the game (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), movement display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) can be executed,
In the first period and the second period, the operation speed of the information display in the information effect does not change (for example, as shown in FIGS. During the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the rotation display of the suspension display is displayed at the rotation speed V3, and the movement display of the telop is displayed at the movement speed V3. part),
The effect execution means executes a still effect (for example, a still image display effect) of displaying a still image obtained by freezing the effect moving image after displaying the effect moving image that progresses at the second speed in the second period. is possible and
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which presentation mode is the static presentation (for example, FIGS. 10-16).
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed, the control game enters an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion that can output BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). As shown in the game control microcomputer 100 step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS170 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 portion),
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effects. In addition, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include an invention relating to a game machine of the following means 2 or 3. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times of special figure games executed in the normal game state (the number of times of execution of variable display) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.) is 1000 When the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of times (special number of times) is reached (establishment of special conditions), the game state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability that it is determined to be a big hit as a result of the special game is increased. It is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the special game after that, and the big hit occurs even if the number of times of the special game (the number of times of execution of the variable display) reaches 1000 times in the normal game state. When there was none, there was something that generated a time-saving state instead of a variable state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief for the player is insufficient when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the special number of times. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that are

The gaming machine of means 2 is
Performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. is a game machine,
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). As shown in the game control microcomputer 100 step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS170 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 portion),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 , a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the desire to play the game can be enhanced. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
Predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-49, step 108IWS811 in effect control CPU 120 is executed part) and
Based on the establishment of the special condition, a special notification effect (for example, the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2)) to notify that the special state control is started , blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C), etc.) , As shown in FIGS. 12-23, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS 638),
In the period before the special condition is established, the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the effect control CPU 120 (See FIG. 12-50).
According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotating display of a pending display in each pending display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) are diagrams showing the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β1; FIG. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 2nd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 3rd ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 4th ready-to-win production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 2nd reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production|presentation in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining time saving classification. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characteristic part 108IW; It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of telop display during customer waiting; It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the pre-reading advance notice effect; It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advance notice effect execution determination table and an advance notice effect mode determination table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display to reduce the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of time-saving rush imitation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production; It is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that saves time in Modification 1; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications 2 to 4 of the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a forewarning effect execution determination table and a forecast effect mode determination table in Example 2; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in the modified example 1 of Example 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of the production mode until it shifts to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

A mode for implementing a pachinko game machine, which is a game machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Effect executing means (for example, Production control CPU 120) and
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and production sounds are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit (for example, an IC079SG132 for speech synthesis) that reproduces sound, an amplifier circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit, and a sound that is amplified by the amplifier circuit. and speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, the highly reproducible effect sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect executing means can output the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means during a predetermined period of the second period at the same speed as the first period, and In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from that in the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the first In the first half of each reach performance second half execution period of the third reach performance and fourth reach performance, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach performance execution period of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance. While the effect sound is output from 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4, in the latter half of each reach effect latter half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, V4. The part that outputs the effect sound at a different playback speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the playback speed V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the sound effect can be changed for a specific period of the second period in which the moving picture effect is displayed at the second speed, so that the effect of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light in at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode,
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a period shorter than that in the first period (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, execution periods of the first reach production, the second reach production, and the third reach production and the fourth The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than the execution period of the first half of the ready-to-win effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change period of the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progress of the presentation is slow, so that the presentation effect in the second period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
a predetermined effect (e.g., ready-to-win effect) in which a character effect animation is displayed in the first display area and a effect sound is output by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation; Information production that operates information display related to variable display (for example, rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), 2 (C) telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T) effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect in which the information display is operated at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 10-19 to 10- As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at a rotation speed of V3. , the part that displays the moving display of the telop at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion larger than the combined area of the area of and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the predetermined effect than the information effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during which variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10). -18 to FIG. 10-25, during the period other than during the ready-to-win effect, the rotating display of the suspended display is executed at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspended memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspended memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In the display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 6 to 8,
The information effect is a moving display effect (for example, moving display of a message corresponding to the game state in the telop display area 079SG005T) in which the information display suggesting the state of the effect in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved and displayed in the second display area. the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a moving display effect for moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, in FIG. 10-2(C) As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time they are displayed again to the left. (the part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least part of the information display is always visible to the player, the player can easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sounds, such as speakers 8L and 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ) and a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 120). ,
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect rendering that is different from the predetermined rendering and is for enhancing the rendering effect of the predetermined rendering (for example, FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and FIG. As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying the concentration line on the image display device 5 in the second reach production latter half execution period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, further enhance the performance effect in the second period, and allow the player to recognize by the effect performance that the second period is over and the notification performance is to be executed. can be done easily.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The production executing means is
The effect production is performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effect for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, the mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 10-28 (C) is displayed, and the mode shown in FIG. 10-28 (D) As shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), it can be executed in a mode in which the number of displayed concentration lines is larger than that in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect rendering in which the degree of effect of enhancing the rendering effect increases sequentially (for example, FIGS. 10-28 (C) and 10-28 ( As shown in D), the portion where the number of concentration lines displayed increases as the battle production progresses)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effect of increasing the effect of the predetermined production is sequentially increased, the execution of the notification production after the second period ends is played by the effect production. make it easier for people to recognize

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. Effect (for example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C) Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing telop movement display),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decoration pattern stops with a combination of a big hit as a big hit notification effect, the big hit occurs in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area including the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The production executing means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a reserved display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U). ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), FIG. 10-31 (G), as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the suspension display and the first suspension storage display area 079SG005D, the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate are erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas capable of displaying effect moving images, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) including
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect), a notification effect for notifying whether or not a privilege is awarded after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a loss notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the movement display of
with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area A portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the change in the visibility of the first display area in the pre-notification period allows the player to easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 14,
The display means is means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and an image generation means (for example, display including a control unit 123),
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer by the image generating means (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the second image data A portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. over a predetermined period (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa and a part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge and display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first rendering layer changes over a predetermined period from the specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect based on the detection of the action of the player by the action detection means (for example, control to the big win game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or parts that can signal that they are not controlled by the state),
An action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that prompts a player to act by displaying an action promoting image for executing the notification effect in the first display area is executable,
Although the visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect decreases, the visibility of the action promotion effect does not decrease (for example, the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the first image The part where the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as an image of data does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the action promoting effect stand out from the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the action.

Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
As display areas that can display effect moving images, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information effect for operating information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- 2 (B) shown in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U rotating display of the reserved display, and movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C)) Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the A part where the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a effect moving image whose progression speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect is progressing speed The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
In a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, a pre-notification effect of displaying a specific still image corresponding to the stoppage of progress of the predetermined effect being executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The information display operation in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, the first suspension Part where rotating display of reserved display in memory display area 079SG005D and second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and moving display of telop in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the pre-notification period. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the static image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect will be executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but the suspended display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are displayed. The part where the color of the 4th pattern that is attached is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (since the color of the image of the information effect does not change, the color does not change). It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific still image).

Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a moving image,
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and an effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a big hit notification effect and a deviation notification effect) for informing whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect,
with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., first reach effect and third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., second reach effect and fourth reach effect) after the first section,
Each of the first section and the second section is a first period (for example, the first half of the ready-to-reach effect first half execution period, the first half of the second ready-to-win effect part of the execution period, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect part of the executing period, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect. production first half execution period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach production second half execution period, second reach production second half execution period, third reach production second half execution period, fourth Reach production second half execution period) and
The production executing means is
In the first period, the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part in which moving images of each ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect),
During the second period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the second half of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the animation of each ready-to-win effect. ),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
The predetermined effect is a first pattern that shifts to the second section after the execution of the first section (for example, variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, and FIG. Variable display of super reach β3 shown in 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Further, the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the first section and the predetermined performance is executed without shifting to the second section or the second section is executed. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ends or whether or not the privilege is given by executing the predetermined performance at the second speed in the second section, the interest in the game can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The production executing means is
An end suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect ends in the first interval without transitioning to the second interval (for example, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect) is defeated by an enemy character) can be executed,
The end-suggesting effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, and 10-21 , FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is knocked down by the enemy character and the first A portion where the reach performance second half execution period or the third reach performance second half execution period is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in A portion that displays a moving image when an enemy character falls down due to a hit with an attack at a progress speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), animation when the friendly character falls down The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined performance when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance, the progress speed when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for the granting of the privilege, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth-speed effect moving image is not displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an action-promoting effect (for example, an operation-promoting effect) that prompts the player to act, and a notification effect (for example, , jackpot notification effect and loss notification effect) and effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the action promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the 4 Part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility, and furthermore, since the predetermined performance progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion performance during the second period, the performance effect of the predetermined performance can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The action promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation succession period of the push button 31B) for notifying the effective detection period for receiving the detection of the player's action by the action detection means. ,
When the validity detection period ends, the effect execution means detects the action of the player by the action detection means within the validity detection period from the timing after the end of the validity detection period. 10-33 (E), 10-34 (E), and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (F), the same notification effect can be executed A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, when the action detection means does not detect the action of the player, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the valid detection period elapses, so the action detection means detects the action of the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), an effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is not a big hit notification effect) for notifying whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed;
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect, and In the second notification period after the first notification period, the effect moving image, which is the fourth speed slower than the third speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, and 10 -22, figures 10-24 and figures 10-26 (E) to figures 10-26 (G), figures 10-29 (C) to figures 10-29 (E), figures 10-30 (B) to figures 10 -30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35C), the attack of the ally character in the big hit notification effect The animation of the portion where hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the portion where the enemy character falls down is displayed at a progressing speed of V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not granted in the notification effect, the effect moving image of the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the effect moving image of the fourth speed during the second notification period. There are (for example, FIGS. -30 (H), Figure 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figure 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in Figure 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), moving speed The part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and furthermore, when the provision of the privilege is notified as the notification performance, the performance moving image with the progress speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the privilege is granted. It is possible to impress the player with the performance moving image of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to form 25,
The effect executing means performs a special effect during the second period only when a privilege is given (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (pattern SG- 2. Still image display effect))).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to form 26,
The privilege granting means provides a first privilege (for example, a non-variable big hit jackpot game state) as the privilege and a second privilege (for example, a probability variable big win big hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. is grantable and
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a resurrection effect shown in Modification 079SG-4) for notifying that a privilege will be granted after once notifying that the privilege will not be granted in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is granted in the notification effect, the second privilege is granted (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the big hit notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big win),
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the special performance is executed after the notification performance informs that the privilege is not granted, the first privilege or the second privilege is granted. (For example, as shown in the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 and the resurrection effect is executed after the deviation notification effect is executed, the non-probable variable jackpot Part where there is a case where it is controlled to the game state and a case where it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the execution of the special effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the provision of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Sound output means capable of outputting dramatic sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis mounted on speakers 8L and 8R and voice control board 13, voice data ROM079SG133, amplifier circuit 079SG134);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect moving images;
Benefit granting means (eg, CPU 103) that grants benefits (eg, jackpot gaming state);
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect animation of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect animation of the character. ), and a first action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action-promoting image (for example, an operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action-promoting image. is displayed on the display means to prompt the player's action (for example, an operation promotion effect), and whether or not the privilege is given based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means is determined. Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (for example, a big hit notification effect and a losing notification effect);
with
The production executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the animation of each ready-to-reach production is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the display means can display the effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, FIG. 10 -19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the animation of each reach effect moves to the progress speed V2 the part displayed on the image display device 5),
For the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10- 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production, the third ready-to-reach production, and the fourth ready-to-reach production, and the latter half of the execution period of each, the speakers 8L and 8R From the part where BGM and production sounds are output at normal playback speed V4),
After the start of the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect part),
When the action-promoting effect is executed by the first action-promoting image, the first action-promoting image is displayed while visibly displaying the effect moving image of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promoting effect is executed by the second action promoting image, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means so that the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is more difficult to see than when the first action promoting image is displayed. , displaying the second action-promoting image in a display area wider than the display area of the first action-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed, since the transparency of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is 0%, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second action promoting image is displayed is higher than when the first action promoting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the operation promoting image 079SG005Bb The ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when is displayed is lower than the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and to make the player pay attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion effect. It can improve amusement interest.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying, on the display means, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed (for example, FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting effect, a battle effect is displayed while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed. The part where the display of the effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first action promoting image is being displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 29,
The production executing means is
A first predetermined effect (for example, a first ready-to-reach effect and a third ready-to-reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second ready-to-reach effect and a fourth ready-to-reach effect) can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first reach production first half execution period and the third reach production first half execution period) in the predetermined production, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach It is possible to shift to the second half of the production execution period and the third reach production second half execution period),
The predetermined effect is a first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIGS. and variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22), and a second specific pattern (for example, , variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. A third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution of two specific sections, and is executable and
When shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the performance Display the effect moving image whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , a portion for executing the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third ready-to-reach effect second half part execution period to the fourth ready-to-win effect first half part execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed of the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, when shifting from the first reach production first half execution period to the first reach production second half execution period, the first reach production second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance, from the second half execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win performance. , the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, since the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific effect, and when shifting from the second specific effect to the second specific effect, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, and further, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect by changing the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect to the second speed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 079SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the feature part 079SG includes a voice synthesizing circuit board 13 for synthesizing sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. An IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and a voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted. Sound number data is output to the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 based on the performance control command to cause the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG 134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesizing IC079SG132 and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting sounds corresponding to the effects executed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data are the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature part 079. FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decoration patterns, a ready-to-win effect, an operation promotion effect and a still image display effect, which will be described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of the reserved display of the white circle, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second reserved storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of circular reserved displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, of the entire display area of the image display device 5, the portion excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

It should be noted that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are closer to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 than the first display area 079SG005F to display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol). , and the number of reserved memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the characteristic portion 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and lateral width are formed extremely shorter than the height H and lateral width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. there is

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F that occupies the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 performs a reserved display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) which will be described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes a telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described later, so that the game state and the effect being executed are displayed. A message (e.g., a message corresponding to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!" during a specific ready-to-win effect) is moved from left to right at a constant speed (e.g., movement speed V3). It is possible to display one

It should be noted that the characters included in the message corresponding to the game state are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T at the same time when the display reaches the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and is displayed again from the left to the right. is moved in the direction Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is easy to recognize the current game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the suspension display in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to rotate and move with

As shown in FIG. 10-2(D), the fourth pattern 079SG005J has an upper pattern 079SG005Ja and a lower pattern 079SG005Jb, and these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb alternately blink at a constant cycle. , to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb are both extinguished (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display when the variable display result is lost, while the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. In this case, both are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

It should be noted that the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing at which a new pending memory is generated and the timing at which a new variable display is started. is the only display whose number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure reserved memory number and the display of the second special figure reserved memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image can be displayed by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0% depending on the situation. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decoration pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), the image data 3 is data drawn to display the variable display of decorative patterns and the ready-to-win effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. is set. The highest display priority is set for image data 1, and the lowest is set for image data 3 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as an image in a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially invisible or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is

In this characteristic portion 079SG, although the details will be described later, the images based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while the image data 3 Based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance, the images are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images and still images of a plurality of advancing speeds.

In particular, in this feature part 079SG, although the details will be described later, the display of the animation of the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach can be executed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It has become. This is because the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V1 and the data for the moving image to be displayed at the advancing speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect animation to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on the data, part of the effect animation for the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be possible to display

In this way, in the present characteristic section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to V1, the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player becomes the first speed, and during the non-slow motion period, the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect recognized by the player is the second slow speed. In other words, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image whose rendering progress speed is slow in this characteristic portion 079SG, is displayed before the slow-motion moving image, and the image progressing speed is V1 compared to the non-slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed is fine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects is exemplified (see FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the contents of the effect animation itself displayed on the image display device 5 are the same as the contents of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not become a slow motion period, in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, the slow motion period may be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super ready-to-win effect in which the content of the effect moving image is the same as described above but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect moving image having the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention is used. means that the effect moving image of the same content is displayed at a video progressing speed V2 that is slower than the video progressing speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, so that the duration is longer than that of the non-slow motion super reach effect. The effect moving image to be displayed corresponds.

In addition, as described above, in this feature part 079SG, by slowing down the image progress speed of the effect moving image, a slow motion effect is configured in which the progress speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R , does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. By accelerating the reproduction speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be constructed in which the player feels that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying effect moving images, and among these effect output means, at least one effect output means advances the effect is different between the slow-motion period and the non-slow-motion period so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is the slow-motion during the slow-motion period.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is always displayed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may change the progress speed of the display of the effect animation of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases and decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characteristic portion 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characterizing portion 079SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 079SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 079SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this feature part 079SG is based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this feature part 079SG with reference to FIG. ``Probability variable jackpot A'', ``probability variable jackpot B'', and ``probability variable jackpot C'' that are executed and shifted to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed to a low probability high base state. The "non-probable variable jackpot" to be shifted is set.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win B" is a big win in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, the big win game state by "non-probability variable big win" is a big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. In some cases, the “non-probability variable jackpot” is referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probability variable jackpot.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this characteristic portion 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic part 079SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

High-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A, the variable probability big win B, and the variable probability big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. . Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the big hit type as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C" to a big hit state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 079SG. In this characteristic portion 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 079SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 079SG also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 079SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic part 079SG. In this characteristic part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β3 big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table have different allocation numbers of determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach β type variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β3).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 loss) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β3).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 079SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 (the ready-to-reach effect executed in the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first ready-to-reach effect described later is executed. This is a ready-to-win effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the ready-to-win effect of super reach α2 (ready-to-win effect executed by variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2) is executed in the first half and the latter half of the first ready-to-win effect described later. This is a ready-to-reach effect in which the variable display result is lost after the change, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α3 (ready-to-reach effect executed by variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach to be described later. This is a ready-to-win effect in which a second ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the latter half of the effect are executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a loss.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit after being executed up to the second ready-to-win effect is the first ready-to-win effect to be executed. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by variable display of fluctuation patterns PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit after the first half of the third reach effect described later is executed. Yes, the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PA2-4) is changed after the first half and the second half of the third reach effect described later are executed. It is a ready-to-reach production, and the ready-to-reach production of super reach β3 (ready-to-reach production executed with variable display in the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third ready-to-reach production described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, is further executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win or a losing effect.

And, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the longer the variable display It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit (big hit expectation) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit after being executed up to the fourth ready-to-win effect is the third ready-to-win effect. It is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the second ready-to-win effect is always executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect is always executed after the third ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect may be executed alone.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, each ready-to-win effect can be executed by combining the first ready-to-win effect and the second ready-to-win effect during the variable display, and by combining the third ready-to-reach effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-reach production is a combination other than these combinations (for example, the first ready-to-reach production and the fourth ready-to-reach production, the second ready-to-reach production and the third You may provide a case where it is executed in a combination of ready-to-win effects, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is based on this Not limited, part of the super reach β system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is super reach α system variation pattern (variation pattern PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may be lower than any of the big hit expectations.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 079SG, there is a game control data holding area 079SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 079SG153, a game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 079SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 079SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 079SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 079SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 079SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 079SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (second 1 pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting entrance winning designation commands and reservation storage number notification commands. , A storage area (entry) for storing separately in the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the pending storage number notification command.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are the entries (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing portion 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 079SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" ( step 079 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 079 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 079SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" ( step 079 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 079SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, storage storage for the effect control board 12 Settings for sending the number notification command are made (step 079 SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 079SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 079SG. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and these first Suspended display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotated display) the suspended displays displayed in the suspended storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation processing (step 079SGS163) and the fourth design display processing (step 079SG164) for executing the variable display of the fourth design 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect control process flag process.

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A, one buffer number each Shift up (step 079 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit B or the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chances. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect in the second half of the first ready-to-win effect or the second half of the third ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, when the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the characteristic portion 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, in this characteristic portion 079SG, only one production pattern is provided as the production mode of the chance-up production, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as a performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the degree of expectation for big win may differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of performance start timings for performance may be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win may differ depending on which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining execution/non-execution of the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079 SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss Still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect for displaying the still image displayed at the end of the second ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect is started. A determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16A, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is a failure. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the pattern SG-1 of the still image display effect is to freeze the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second ready-to-win effect. In the pattern SG-2 of the still image display effect, the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , is an effect pattern for changing the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), proceed to step 079SGS283. ), an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth ready-to-win effect, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to the pattern SS at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is a failure. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the pattern SS-1 of the operation prompting effect is a pattern of displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is a effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

In other words, as the operation promotion effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2). ), the ratio is higher than when the image of the normal size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since there is a high probability that the variable display result is a big win (a big win notification performance is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion performance is executed. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. determine whether or not Then, when the process timer after subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer after subtraction has timed out, the process data is processed. As soon as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

10-18 to 10-35, description will be given of the effects of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the characteristic portion 079SG.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, the effect animation such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be. Hereinafter, the flashing or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the characteristic portion 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and flashed or lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friend character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

During the period when friendly character A attacking enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after displaying a moving image in which the ally character A succeeds in attacking and the enemy character A falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped in a combination of the big wins to control the big win game state. to be notified. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the jackpot notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A succeeds is executed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling portion is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion in which it is announced that the decorative symbols are stopped in a winning combination and controlled to the winning game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 10-26 (G)). applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach α2 or super reach α3 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A does not succeed, and the period shifts to the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-19 and FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the transition is made to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-27(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is the variable display of super reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. Secondly, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the friendly character A's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the variable display result is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols that are not matched. is reported.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the part where the friendly character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach α3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character A succeeds and the enemy character A is defeated. Then, it shifts to the execution period of the first half of the second ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the friend character A and the enemy character B The battle production of progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

As the battle effect progresses and the second half of the second ready-to-reach effect first half execution period is approaching, as shown in FIGS. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, display of concentration lines is started, and in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, display of a moving image in which the friend character A attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-described effect rendering is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the moving image of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 flashes violently. Therefore, the increase in the number of concentration lines and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the big win notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second reach effect latter half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. The image that was being played (in this characteristic portion 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of the friend character A hits the enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and the BGM, effect sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the animation of the battle production. Return to the period before the speed drops to V2.

Incidentally, when the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the end of the still image display effect in which the color is reversed, as a big win notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B falls down, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. be notified. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. However, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decoration patterns stop with a winning combination after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. In particular, when the combination of decorative patterns indicating a big win is stopped as the big win notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of a big hit notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A ) ~ as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), the case where the big hit notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in Figure 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H) In some cases, production is executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 10-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the advancing speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. After the enemy character B has fallen down, it is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

In addition, as a failure notification effect when the static image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the attack of the friendly character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B hits the friendly character A. After the ally character A hits and falls down, the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of missing symbols, and it is notified that the big win game state is not controlled.

10-21, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the enemy character B is knocked down by the enemy character B without the attack of the friend character A hitting. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, the effect moving image such as the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at the normal progressing speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from left to right (moving image progress speed in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progress speed of V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM and effect sounds corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a constant cycle. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), when the timing for developing the ready-to-win effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached. The execution period starts, and the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. When the second half of the execution period of the first half of the third ready-to-win effect is reached as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image in which the friend character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion as described above (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle presentation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-22 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big win notification effect, after a moving image of a successful attack by the ally character B and the enemy character A falling down is displayed, it is reported that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. In particular, when the big hit notification effect is started, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display is finished, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the display of the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is performed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30 (E)), and then the enemy character The display of the moving image of the falling part is executed at the advancing speed V2 which is lower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the moving image of the part in which it is announced that the decoration symbols are stopped in the combination of the big wins and is controlled to the big win game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Fig. 10-30 (G) applicable).

It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

On the other hand, when the variable display is super reach β2 or super reach β3 variable display, when the third reach effect first half execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and FIGS. 10-32(A) to 10-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect is executed, the battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and BGM, production sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the effect moving image of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), the chance-up effect may be executed. . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similarly to the effect animation of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, while the small patterns are displayed with priority over the chance-up production effect animation, the chance-up production production animation is displayed in the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32 (B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5). Therefore, in this characteristic part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbols, and the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed. By giving priority to display over the pattern, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chang-up effect on the image display device 5. - 特許庁

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the animation of the chance-up production is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern is displayed rather than the production animation of the chance-up production. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the ready-to-win effect in execution has developed from, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

When the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first ready-to-reach effect progresses as the battle effect progresses, display of a moving image of the friend character B attacking the enemy character A starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. be. When the moving image starts to be displayed, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the appearance of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle effect animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period.

When the variable display is super reach β2 variable display, when the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-23 and FIGS. Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, after the ally character B's attack fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a miss as a miss notification effect.

It should be noted that during the failure notification effect, the display of the moving image is executed at V1, which is the normal progress speed, between the portion where the attack of the friend character B fails and the portion where the variable display result is notified of the failure. be.

Further, during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the period. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the super reach β3 variable display, as shown in FIGS. The attack of the character B succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the transition is made to the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the friend character AB and the enemy character B Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the BGM, production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the second half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect progresses due to the progress of the battle effect, as shown in FIGS. Display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F. When the display of the moving image is started, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image switches from V1 to V2 which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the image of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

It should be noted that during the period in which the friendly character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). , the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sounds, etc. is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the progress speed of the animation of the battle effect decreases to V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed).

Then, when the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect progresses, the operation promoting effect is executed. When pattern SS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 along with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B. display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of , and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 are started. In addition, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while enlarging the effect image 079SG005E. Update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can see the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E. The visibility of the battle production is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when pattern SS-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, the first display of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the region 079SG005F, display of an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B and a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B start. and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Incidentally, as described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), the constant It is displayed as a movie of the progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, the player can be notified of the operation reception period of the push button 31B by updating display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb Most of the images in the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation-promoting output is included in the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation-promoting effect.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2, but the end timing of the operation promotion effect (push At the point of time when the button 31B operation reception end timing), the progress does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B will hit the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is When finished), the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect is executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

10-24 and FIGS. 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), as the big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, there is a moving image in which the attack of the friend character B hits the enemy character B. Although the moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the advancing speed V1. It should be noted that during the big hit notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L, 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the design determination period, the stop display with the combination of the decorative design and the small design showing the jackpot, and the lighting display of the fourth design (the lighting display of both the upper design 079SG005Ja and the lower design 079SG005Jb) ) is performed.

10-25 and FIGS. 10-35(E) to 10-35(G). On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is informed that the big winning game state is not controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. With 079SG005Sa, an image of a big hit notification effect is displayed.

10-25, as the failure notification effect, a moving image is displayed at the progressing speed V1 until the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped without the attack of the ally character B being hit. It should be noted that during the deviation notification effect, the rotation of the suspension display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3 without change, and from the speakers 8L and 8R is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect. Switch to display. After the end of the variable display, the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is stopped during the design confirmation period, and the fourth pattern is turned off. ) is performed.

10-26 (H), 10-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 10-30 (E), 10-30 (I), 10-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 10-32(H), 10-35(D), and 10-35(H), in this characteristic portion 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. is performed, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Also, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) during which the display of the effect moving image of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. During the execution period of the first half part, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the second half of each of the first ready-to-win effect, the second ready-to-win effect, the third ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect. During the partial execution period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, the degree of empathy of the player for the teammate character displayed during the ready-to-win effect is enhanced, and a big win is announced. Since it is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, during the execution period of the first half of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, and during the execution period of the latter half of each, the BGM, effect sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R are played. Since the output is unchanged at V4, which is the normal reproduction speed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, since the sound output hand in this characteristic part 079SG includes the voice synthesizing IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, reproducibility in variable display including the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the execution of the jackpot game, etc. It is possible to output high-quality background music (music) and sound effects such as sound effects at an appropriate volume from the speakers 8L and 8R, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second reach production second half and during the execution period of the fourth reach production latter half, the game effect Since the lamp 9 blinks at a period shorter than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a short period in the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In addition, in this characterizing part 079SG, a form in which the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the reach effect or during the period of the second half of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, an example has been illustrated in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second reach effect latter half part and during the execution period of the fourth reach effect latter half part execution period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing of the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first ready-to-reach effect, the second ready-to-reach effect, the third ready-to-reach effect, and the fourth ready-to-reach effect, the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect progresses. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, both the rotation speed of the pending display and the movement speed of the telop are constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example is given in which both the rotation speed of the suspension display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are set to V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the area of the third display area 079SG005Sb combined. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-win effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotation display of the suspension display is rotated at the rotation speed V3 in the first suspension memory display area 079SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 079SG005U. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is performed at the moving speed V3. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time when the display ends, the characters appear in the telop display area 079SG005T. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the form in which the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop is moved in the telop display area 079SG005T. A portion of the displayed telop may be invisible to the player at some point.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half of the reach effect execution period, the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying the concentration line on the display device 5, the effect presentation can enhance the presentation effect in the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-win presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. The increase in the number makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the big hit notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, an example of a form in which the effect production in the present invention is displayed with a concentrated line is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle production progresses, the degree of effect of the effect production is gradually increased (for example, the range of movement of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, the stick Alternatively, the vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, or the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect When the decorative symbols are stopped by a combination of a big hit, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden to display the first display area 079SG005F. Since the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the big win notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further enhanced, and the player is made to recognize that it is controlled to the big win game state. It can be done easily.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when executing the big hit notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa In the state where the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the big hit notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the second In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the big hit notification effect may be displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T.

At this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed transparently or reduced, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the big hit notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second reach effect latter half execution period, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. As shown in 10-21, during the execution period of the still image display effect, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotating display of the suspended display in the first suspended storage display area 079SG005D and the second suspended storage display area 079SG005U, and the Since the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that the suspension display is being displayed or the telop movement is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the telop due to the stoppage of the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29 (A) to 10-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect, the form of reversing the color of the still image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to this, but the forms of changing the color of the still image include changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of the still image, and adding new colors to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the color of the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can easily see the colors displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the pending display, telop, fourth pattern, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Also, in each variable display of super reach in this characteristic part 079SG, a pattern of shifting to a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect after execution of a first reach effect and a third reach effect, and a pattern of shifting to a first reach effect and a third reach effect Since there is a pattern in which the variable display is terminated by shifting to the second ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect after the performance is executed, the display of the ready-to-win effect animation progresses during the first ready-to-reach effect and the third ready-to-win effect. Whether or not to shift to the second ready-to-win effect or the fourth ready-to-win effect after being executed at the speed V2, and display of the effect animation of the ready-to-reach effect during the second ready-to-reach effect or the third ready-to-win effect are executed at the progress speed V2. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach production and the third reach production, the second During the execution period of the second half of the first reach production and the second half of the execution period of the second half of the third reach production, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the second half execution period of the first reach production or the latter half of the third reach production are carried out at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the second half of the first half of the ready-to-win performance or from the first half of the execution period of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. is different from the progress speed of the performance in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance. You can prevent it from being lost. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the big hit notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG, while the animation when the enemy character falls down due to the attack of the friendly character being hit is displayed at the progress speed V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H) ), FIGS. 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and FIGS. 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), in the failure notification effect, a moving image when the ally character falls down is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification performance is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification performance is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the result of the variable display of super reach is executed and the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the super reach variable display, the display of the effect animation of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to produce variations in the production of the failure notification production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the third speed in the present invention is set as the progressing speed V1 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect, and the progress speed V2 of the effect moving image during the big hit notification effect is set as the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the advancing speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the fourth ready-to-win effect, the operation promoting effect is executed when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Therefore, the effect of the fourth ready-to-win effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 079SG, the display of the fourth ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V2 during execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promoting effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect may be performed at the progress speed V1. Further, a suggestive performance suggesting that the operation promoting performance is executed can be executed before the operation prompting performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestive performance, the display of the performance animation of the fourth ready-to-reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. may be executed.

In addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG. While the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth ready-to-win effect is continuously executed at the progress speed V2, but does not proceed until the notification effect. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. , the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the end of the operation reception period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 079SG, a configuration in which the push button 31B is used as the detection means in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is a stick controller 31A or the like other than the push button 31B. In addition to the operating means, sensors capable of detecting the actions of the player, such as motion sensors and touch sensors, may be used.

10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G), 10-29 (C) to 10-29 (E), Figures 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figures 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figures 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C) ), in the big hit notification effect in this characteristic portion 079SG, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the moving image of the part where the enemy character falls down progresses. Displayed at speed V2. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), 10-30 (E) to 10- 30 (G), Figures 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), Figures 10-35 (D) to Figure 10-35 (F), as shown in this characteristic portion 079SG deviation notification production A moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is never displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the effect animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby impressing the player that the big win game state is controlled. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which colors are inverted). As a still image display effect, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this characteristic portion 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , an effect other than the static image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of the characteristic portion 079SG includes a pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating a push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed in any of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation prompting image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2 is Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to which pattern SS-1 or SS-2 the operation promoting performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, the operation prompting image During the display of 079SG005Ba, the display of the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb shows the progress speed V2 (slow motion ) has been exemplified in which the visibility of the fourth ready-to-reach effect animation (battle effect) being displayed is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is pattern SS -2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the fourth reach effect (battle production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to pattern SS-2 of the operation promotion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this characterizing portion 079SG, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the second ready-to-win effect can be executed after the first ready-to-win effect, and the fourth ready-to-win effect can be executed after the third ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, the variable display of super reach α1 for announcing a big win after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and the variable display of super reach β1 for notifying a big win after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach performance execution period after the first half of the first reach performance execution period and notifies of a failure, and second half of the third reach performance after the first half of the third reach performance execution period. Variable display of super ready-to-reach β2 for executing partial execution period and informing loss, variable display of super ready-to-win α3 to shift to second ready-to-win performance after first ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period, third ready-to-reach performance exchange partial execution period After that, it is possible to execute variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach production, and as shown in FIGS. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first half of the ready-to-win production second half execution period to the first half of the second ready-to-win production execution period, when shifting from the third half of the ready-to-win production first half execution period to the second half of the third ready-to-win production execution period. , When shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period, the performance animation of each ready-to-win performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first ready-to-win performance first half execution period to the first When shifting to the second half execution period of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the first ready-to-win performance to the first half of the second half of the ready-to-win performance, when shifting from the first half of the third ready-to-win performance to the second half of the third ready-to-win performance. , BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the reproduction speed V4 without changing from the other periods when shifting from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance. Therefore, when shifting from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the execution period of the first ready-reach performance, when shifting from the second half of the execution period of the first reach performance to the first half of the execution period of the second ready-reach performance, the third reach. To give a player a sense of incongruity when shifting from the performance first half execution period to the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period, and when shifting from the third ready-to-win performance second half execution period to the fourth ready-to-win performance first half execution period. You can prevent it from slipping. Furthermore, the display of the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the branch of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player can be easily recognized.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more A ready-to-win effect may be executable, or only one ready-to-win effect may be executable.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention, the present invention can be applied. included.

For example, in the characteristic part 079SG, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach. Although the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern ( A pattern in which the effect moving image is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect motion image is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the content of the effect may be different between the ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the ready-to-reach effect in which the effect moving image is not displayed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the effect moving image is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the form to be output is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, the fourth reach In the first half of each ready-to-reach effect second half execution period of the performance, the reproduction speed is V4 from the speakers 8L and 8R in the same manner as the first-reach effect, second ready-to-reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth ready-to-reach effect first half execution period. While outputting the effect sound at, in the second half (slow motion period) of each reach effect second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect What is V4? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5, which is slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance sound for the ready-to-win performance can be improved by varying the reproduction speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance animation of the ready-to-win performance is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect by displaying an effect image 079SG005E, displaying an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, or the like. While it is possible to reduce the visibility, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed, when the second ready-to-win effect ends along with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as a part of the big hit notification effect or the losing notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth ready-to-win effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes When the operation promoting effect is finished without operating the button 31B, as a part of the big hit notification effect or loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed secondly. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), as shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F) Thus, it is necessary to notify that the big hit game state is controlled as the big hit notification effect, or that the big win game state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce the visibility of only the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the second After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, the change in the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb increases. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, and the like.

The effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display region 079SG005F is an image drawn as the image of the second image data shown in FIG. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is not changed, and the first display area 079SG005Sb is displayed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be appropriately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

In addition, in the present modification 079SG-2, the mode of executing the operation promotion effect during the fourth reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. Can be run as part.

In addition, when the operation promotion effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D), an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect. do.

By displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or based on the end of the operation promotion performance without the player operating the push button 31B, the game is controlled to the big win game state, or the big win game state. is notified that it is not controlled by

As described above, in the modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data are reduced. Since the visibility of is not lowered, the operation promoting effect can be emphasized with respect to the fourth ready-to-win effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, when the static image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. It is not limited to this, and as a modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always The variable probability big win (furthermore, the variable probability big win A that is most advantageous to the player) may be achieved. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second ready-to-win effect, control is performed again to the jackpot game state after the failure notification effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a resurrection effect that notifies of. In addition, in the case where the resurrection effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) A case where it is controlled to the big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the big hit game state of probability variable big hit) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big win notification performance is executed after the still image display performance is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, as an example of displaying a message indicating the gaming state as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T As the displayed telop, it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the ready-to-win effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 079SG, the mode in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the effect being executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T. The telops displayed in , are those that can specify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (jackpot expectation), the explanation of the production during execution (especially the reach production), the reach production It may be an announcement effect or the like that can be executed from the timing before.

10-33 and 10-34, in the characteristic portion 079SG, during the period in which the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion display of the image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-33 and 10-34, the characteristic portion 079SG exemplifies a mode of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is not limited to simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped and displayed to form an operation prompting image. An effect in which 079SG005Ba and an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb are displayed may be executed.

In addition, when the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the central portion of the image display device 5 is executed as an indication effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The movement display speed may decrease as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect will be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 differs from that when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. may For example, when the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image display of the ready-to-win effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Although the flashing cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the animation of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the moving image of the ready-to-win effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as shown in FIGS. Later, an example is given in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in a combination indicating a big win. The timing may be during the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that the player can operate. may be applied to By doing so, when the player has set the output of the effect sound that suits his/her preference, the speaker 8L is displayed when the moving image of each reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. , 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, the effect sound is faster than the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself/herself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to low speed reproduction.

Further, in the characteristic portion 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute the effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect. is executed, the variable display result is always lost, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second half of the first reach effect execution period and the second half of the third reach effect, After the effect of defeating the ally character by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the ready-to-win effect, and then the variable display result shows the big win. (For example, a case of executing a resurrection effect) may be provided.

When executing the resurrection effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked prior to the display of the moving image of the resurrection effect on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is given to the player. may be made to recognize that is executed. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the resurrection effect, for example, the effect may be such that the ally character attacks the enemy character again and defeats the enemy character. In particular, when the resurrection effect is executed, a part of the moving image of the resurrection effect (for example, the moving image of the scene in which the enemy character falls down) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. good too.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are not displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to a high setting value (eg, 6) that is advantageous for the player. is set, even if the variable display results of super reach α1 and super reach β1 are out of range at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1 good. By doing so, it is possible to use the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the variable display result is wrong while suppressing the player's interest in the fact that the variable display result is wrong in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It becomes possible.

Further, in the characterizing portion 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and is advantageous when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling a game in a state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R and a sound control board 13 capable of outputting a production sound a voice synthesizing IC (079SG132), a voice data ROM (079SG133), an amplifier circuit (079SG134), a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a motion picture, and a motion picture of a character being displayed on the display means; Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) for outputting effect sound by the sound output means in accordance with the display of the character effect animation, and a display that is more variable than the normal state. is likely to be executed in a special state (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. -19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-13 , the part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect execution means generates a effect animation in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed in the first period of the predetermined effect. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is executed During the period, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), and in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is changed to the second period. It is possible to display the effect moving image, which is a second speed slower than the first speed, on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. During the execution period of the latter half of each of the ready-to-win effect and the fourth ready-to-win effect, the animation of each ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2), and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect , the speed of the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25 , the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period, BGM, effect sound, etc. are normally reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. The portion output at V4, which is the speed), and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, the part where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R ), the state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, FIG. 12-13 As shown, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS75, as shown in FIGS. The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) game machine.

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect animation of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production sound including the music and the sound effect. In addition, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort, and at the same time, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed. Since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is performed. is updated, the numerical information reaches the special number of times more easily, and the player is more likely to be rescued, so that motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort when installed in a game arcade and that can increase the player's willingness to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that is less likely to give the player a sense of incongruity in the performance and that can favorably realize the relief of the player, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed. However, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state), and is a special game machine in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. State (for example, time saving state) controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 part that executes, as shown in FIG. 12-19 2, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, game control a portion of the microcomputer 100 for executing step 100IWS71), and the state control means, when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and the special condition is established It is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the game control micro 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the computer 100), the updating means updates numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, a predetermined time (for example, 2ms) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied to the game control microcomputer 100 built-in CTC register setting (step S9011), interrupt is permitted (step S9012 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 108IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 108IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variable state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal pattern is 10% in a normal state, the probability of hitting a normal pattern is increased to 90% in a time saving state, and a game ball wins a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, to the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win a prize.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after turning on the power to the game machine, after the occurrence of the big hit, after the occurrence of time saving, after the occurrence of relief time saving, even if the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) is completed, the next big hit Even if there is no time-saving deviation, it may be controlled to a time-saving state (relief time-saving).

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability per normal pattern may be 1/1, or the probability of deviation is extremely low and the probability per normal pattern may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) is not performed, some or all of the above (2) to (4) are performed to achieve a high base state. may

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.
2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1", which has the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of variations n is 797-957, and the number of times of time saving N is 127-1212. In this example, both the number of times of fluctuation n and the number of times of reduction of working hours N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied even when set to any of the set values.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-47.

(board configuration)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, a right-handed informing LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among them, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that performs variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged vertically, respectively, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this characterizing portion 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 108IW, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present characteristic portion 108IW, it is more advantageous in the normal state to perform a shooting operation (left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time-saving loss probability)
FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 12-2 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, FIG. 12-3 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5” increase in order, and the set value “6” has the highest hit probability “242/65536”. It is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2420/65536". It is high (approximately 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

Even if the time saving probability is configured to be constant while varying the jackpot probability according to the set value as described above, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, time saving without loss By varying the probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured so as to be controllable to a small winning game state. When the configuration is such that the small hit can also be determined, for example, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the small hit probability may be configured to be constant.

In addition, when the small hit is configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a time-saving small hit that is controlled to the time-saving state with the small win as a trigger.

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as how to set the big hit probability and the time saving probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs.

A "variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a 15-round big-hit game state and is shifted to a variable-probability state after the big-hit game state ends. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

The "suddenly variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a two-round big win game state and is shifted to a variable probability state after the big win game state is ended. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "variable probability jackpot", in each round of 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game The big winning hole is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the big winning hole is performed 15 times). On the other hand, when the "sudden probability variable jackpot" occurs, in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the big prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the big prize opening is opened for a short period of time). opening is performed twice). Therefore, in the event of a "suddenly variable probability big hit", it is possible to make it appear as if a sudden transition to a variable probability state has occurred, since it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to be won in the big winning slot.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is achieved, the probability of the "normal big hit" is determined at 40%, and the probability of the hit is 40%. It is determined as a "variable probability big hit" with a probability, and determined as a "sudden variable probability big hit" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. A probability of 5% is determined as a "variable probability big hit", and a probability of 5% is determined as a "suddenly variable probability big hit".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5 (A) and (B), in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving is lost, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving In any case of loss, with a probability of 1/3 it is determined to be "time saving A", with a probability of 1/3 it is decided to be "time saving B", and with a probability of 1/3 "time saving C" is determined.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 12-5 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability of "time saving C" is increased, while if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, "time saving The determination ratio of the time reduction type may be made different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as by increasing the determination probability of "loss A".

In addition, for example, if it is configured to be able to determine the time saving loss even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, it may be configured not to uniformly overwrite the time saving counter or the like even if the time saving loss occurs, or the time saving loss pattern It may be configured so that there are cases where the time saving number counter and the like are overwritten and cases where they are not overwritten depending on the type.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and when it becomes "time saving B", the time saving number 50 It is controlled to the time saving state of times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times of the number of time saving. Also, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit, and when it becomes "time saving B", it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of times of 200 times, "time saving is off" C”, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of the number of times of time saving.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving by relief time saving, if no big hit occurs even after 800 times of fluctuation display is completed, relief time saving is performed again. It is controlled to the time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 time saving times. Therefore, the number of times of time saving by relief time saving is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1−ML)n={(P−1)÷P}n
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of times of time saving when time saving is lost is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that it is the same at 100 time-saving times during the normal state and during the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW. Among them, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big wins. Also, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 12-7 (D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 12-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) is a variation pattern table for just before the relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

Also, FIG. 12-8(H) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table H for the loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, FIG. 12-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display that shortens the repair time. Further, FIG. 12-8(J) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table J for the big hit of the variation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening variation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), FIG. 12-7 (D), and FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the variation pattern PA1-4 Due to the (super-ultra-shortened variation), the rate at which the variation display is executed is increased, and the period until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-7 (C), 12-7 (D), and 12-8 (E), in this example, compared to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultrashortening variation) The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or via the jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ) and no super-reach is performed. In other words, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened there is With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of deviation, but may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via relief time-saving, super reach may be executed at loss at a lower rate than in the time-saving state controlled via time-saving loss or jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Since the ratio of becoming becomes lower, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (F), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (G), in this example, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is not determined and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest when super reach variable display is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not achieved. Note that even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened (that is, the period using the variation pattern table C shown in FIG. 12-7 (C)) At a lower rate, It may be determined to be the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) at the time of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, in the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if it is lost, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rush failure). be. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing in rush) is a variation pattern dedicated to the short-relief time, which is not used for the variable display that does not result in the short-relief time, but is used only in the variable display (missing) that shortens the remedial time. In this example, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (running out), as will be described later, the time-saving rush effect (for example, 12-38 (G), (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and that control is performed in the time saving state, and to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (J), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if the big hit is lost, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom big hit) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to relief time reduction, which is not used for variation display that does not result in relief time reduction, but is used only for relief time reduction variation display (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush fake jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving rush effect (for example, FIG. 12 -38 (G), (H)) and the production (for example, see FIG. 12-41 (G′)) in a common mode (for example, see FIG. 12-41 (G′)), after which the production for notifying that a big hit will be achieved (for example, FIG. 12-41) (H') reference) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is an example, and various modes are conceivable. For example, if the time saving is lost during the time saving state and is controlled again to the time saving state, the same as the variation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) A table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, for example, only if the time saving state continues until the next big hit in the case of the time saving loss (in this example, if the time saving loss A occurs during the time saving state), the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) A variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for deviation during the time saving state controlled by .

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the loss time-saving, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving are configured to use different variation pattern tables (that is, the average variation time is different). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in either case, the same variation pattern table may be used (that is, the average variation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the lost time saving. Also, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is time saving A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time reduction B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specification command (probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a probability variation big hit. .

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until relief time reduction. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 time, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126 times, A command 957E (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 1 designation command is uniform. command 957F(H) is sent to

Command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800 times, A command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (restoration relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction when power is restored. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time when restoration is performed and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number designation command at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. And when it is 800 times or less, a command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a recovery time reduction time number designation command.

In this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the case of transmitting to . For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even when the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in units of one.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving. Command E004 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration specifying command) for designating the start of display of a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the reserved memory is not stored (that is, when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game. Also, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Further, for example, when shifting to a setting change mode for executing setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode for executing setting confirmation processing, a setting value designation command is transmitted after the end of each mode, and then customer waiting demonstration designation is performed. Command is sent. In addition, when the restoration process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, when 10 seconds pass without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, the relief time saving function is A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, a lottery determines whether or not to display a telop). Also, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command after receiving the customer waiting demonstration specifying command, the demonstration movie is reproduced.

Command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (set value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. A value corresponding to the setting value is set to "XX".

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. 12-9 and FIG. 12-10, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound control board 13. FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 12-11 is a flow chart showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1-S7, the processes of steps S8-S9, and the processes of steps S10-S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current relief time reduction counter value and to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time reduction The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power failure), the relief time can be reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the variable display that shortens the relief time is stored before the power failure.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time during recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery from a power failure, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to set a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the recovery time is shortened and transmitted.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, even if the variation display is executed 800 times, if neither the big hit nor the time-saving deviation occurs, the relief time-saving state occurs. will be controlled by In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C that indicate the time saving state, the time saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is performed during the time saving state, and the reserved memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, intentional initialization of the relief time reduction counter can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characterizing part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 100IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the big hit determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 has a low probability jackpot determination value (FIGS. (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 12-2 (B) and FIG. 12-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3.

If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal big win, variable probability big win, sudden variable probability big win) corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area as the type of the big win (step 100IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0. (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the remedy time saving after step 100IWS70, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "800" in the time saving counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since it is subtracted, it may be configured to add 1 again to the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, it may be configured such that "901", which is one more, is set in the time saving number counter in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction number counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or probability variable state, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated. . Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N of step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to EXT data, and issues a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Control for transmission to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 957E(H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving decision flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 100IWS75). . Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as the EXT data, command 957F as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is checked whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and controls the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit the data to the CPU 120 for use (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when transmitting the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, and to execute a fan effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect, which will be described later.

In addition, for example, as will be described later, the number of relief time reduction counters is set (set to "800") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and in a configuration where the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. Only when it becomes, it is configured to transmit the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 2, and when the time is reduced after the second time, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the number of times of saving time 2 are sent. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a time saving flag C indicating a time saving state controlled via relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS79, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving, without performing the time saving loss determination processing after step 100IWS81, it is assumed that there is no time saving loss as it is. It is decided that

In addition, not only during the time saving state through relief time saving, but also during the time saving state through the big win and during the time saving state through the time saving loss, it may be configured not to uniformly determine the time saving state. That is, not only when the time-saving flag C is set, but also when the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are set, the time-saving deviation determination processing after step 100IWS81 is uniformly not performed, and there is no time-saving as it is. may decide to exclude

Conversely, even during the time saving state via relief time saving, it may be configured to be able to determine the time saving deviation by executing the processing after step 100IWS81. In addition, it may be configured such that both relief time saving and time saving deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on relief time saving, or may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on time saving deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is not a time saving state via relief time saving), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS80, if it is in the probability variable state, without performing the time saving loss determination process after step 100IWS81, it is determined to be the loss without time saving as it is. be.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 12-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 12-3).

If it is determined to be time saving (Y in step 100 IWS82), the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving A or time saving) corresponding to the value that matches the type determination random number value stored in the random number buffer area B, time-saving loss C) is determined as the type of time-saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time-saving type determination is performed using the random number for type determination common to the random number for type determination used by jackpot type determination of step 100IWS65, and the random number for type determination. Furthermore, when configured to determine a small hit and also to determine a small hit type, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the big hit type determination and time saving type determination. It suffices to configure such that the determination process is performed by

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and when it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "7". When it is decided to make a sudden probability variable big hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be "9", and when it is decided to be a time-saving loss A, the stop pattern of the special pattern is set to "2". If it is determined to be time-saving deviation B, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be "4", and if it is determined to be time-saving deviation C, the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be "6". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when it is a variation display that reduces the relief time and results in a big hit), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 12-8 (J ) is selected for the relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern table J (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when the variation display is a relief time reduction and is lost), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 12-8 (I ) selects the fluctuation pattern table I for the relief short-time fluctuation loss (step 100IWS 1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less. Check if it is. It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the values of the first reserved storage number counter and the second reserved storage number counter are 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the table for the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (F). selects the variation pattern table F (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (G). is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not less than 10 (N of step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 12-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the normal state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the first special symbol determination buffer. 12-7 and 12-8 is determined (step 100IWS 1716). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 12-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first, if not yet transmitted, the determination result of whether or not to hit the jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the time saving type Based on the determination result of (100IWS1121), to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command ~ display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU120.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be short (step 100IWS1123). 100 IWS 1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 is a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 is a design confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N of step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5 Seconds" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variable display during the probability changing state. The probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and even if the variation display is executed 800 times after the big win game ends, neither the next big win nor the time saving occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "800" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving times (step 100IWS172, S173 reference). By executing the processing of steps 100, IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time-saving state is controlled with the relief time-saving as a trigger, 800 times of fluctuation display is executed without becoming a big hit or time-saving failure. Triggered by this, "800" is set to the relief time reduction counter. Then, after that, even if the variable display is executed 800 times, if the next big hit or time-saving failure does not occur, the second relief time-saving is performed and the time-saving state is controlled. In this example, the time saving deviation does not occur in the time saving state triggered by the relief time saving, but it may occur and when it occurs, the value of the relief time saving number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set. ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N of step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the variable probability counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variable number counter (step 100IWS147), and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag A, and terminates the probability variable state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS141 to S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated while shifting to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation or the probability variable final variation. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the time of start of fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variable final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

In addition, in this example, although it shows the case where the time saving state ends as well as ending the probability changing state in the probability changing final variation, not only such an aspect, only the probability changing state ends and the time saving state continues may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be time saving (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS 154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter if the time saving is out of A (step 100 IWS 155 Y) (step 100IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving deviation A (Y in step 100 IWS 160) ( Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "200" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS 164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the time-saving loss as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is performed 800 times after the time-saving loss, neither the next big hit nor the time-saving loss occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the symbol fixing period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS174).

In this example, it is possible to continuously generate relief time reduction by controlling the time reduction state at the timing of relief time reduction and setting the relief time reduction counter (set "800"). Although it is configured to continue the time saving state until a big hit occurs once the time saving occurs, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction number counter is set only by controlling to the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction number counter is set at the timing of ending the 800-time variable display and controlling to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "800" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "800". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, is set as the symbol determination period to secure the effect period such as the mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and only the small pattern may be displayed so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, it shows the case of setting the same 800 times as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such an aspect do not have. For example, at step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" or a smaller value than "800" may be set to the time saving number counter.

Moreover, in step 100IWS172, the value according to the number of times of a plurality of types of time saving may be set to the time saving number counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "800". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of working hours reduction by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS 172, a value corresponding to the number of times of working hours decided by the lottery process may be set to the number of times of working hours counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(external output signal)
12-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12-18, in this example, as external output signals, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. In addition, the big hit 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, which is reduced in relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, so there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed. 2, external output of two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the time saving state even when the relief time is shortened, if the missing symbol of the variable display that will be the relief time shortening is derived and displayed, at the end of the symbol fixing period, the big hit 2 signal External output is started.

It should be noted that the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a variation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the lost symbol, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the variation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big hit 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Also, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 100IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not the game is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter (step 100IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a variable probability flag and controls the variable probability state (step 100IWS541). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the variable probability counter (step 100IWS542). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW will be described. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if the probability variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variation state (step 100 IWS541 ~ S542), and if the normal jackpot hits, the time saving state A ( It is controlled to the time saving state via the jackpot) (see step 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if it is lost in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process, after the big hit or time saving loss, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss) case) is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the variable probability state, if the variable probability big hit or suddenly the variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled again to the variable probability state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time is reduced. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no case of relief time saving. Also, in the variable probability state, when the variable display is completed 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time-saving state A, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot again It is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time-saving design is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see step 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled again to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (step 100 IWS 166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times of variation display is completed without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state B due to the time saving deviation A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state C, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbols are derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled again to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (step 100IWS170-S173).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving is compared with the number of times of saving time corresponding to the determined type of time saving, and if the remaining number of the current number of times of saving time is larger, the current state of time saving A is continued as it is. may

In addition, in this example, when a normal jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving is larger, continue the current time saving state B as it is It may be configured to

In addition, in this example, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79). , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is off.

In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display by lottery processing, and to end the variable probability state based on the determination to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 12-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In FIGS. 12-21, the processes of steps S71-S76 are similar to those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols, synchronously with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns is performed in a form in which the decoration patterns on the left, middle, and right are reduced.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the fourth symbol variable display is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5. FIG.

The processing of step S77 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the two vertically arranged LEDs in the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b repeat turning on and off alternately, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth pattern. be done.

In addition, when the fluctuation time ends, the stopped design of the fourth design is fixedly displayed at the start of the design fixing period. In this case, when a big win is achieved, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big win symbols are stopped and displayed in red light. In addition, when the time saving is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time saving pattern are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when it becomes a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below as a loss symbol (no time saving) are stopped and displayed in an extinguished state.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. good too.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a dedicated pattern as a time-saving loss pattern of the fourth pattern is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, the stop pattern of the fourth pattern in the case of a big hit and in the case of a time-saving loss. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 12-22 and 12-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command in the relief time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the relief time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a restoration time reduction time number designation command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the received restoration time relief time reduction number designation command, in the image display device 5, until the relief time reduction Control is performed to display the initial outcome according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times or less), "112" as the initial output is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining fluctuation number until relief time reduction is 701 times or more and 800 times or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 701 times or more and 800 times or less.

In addition, not only when displaying the initial output that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, the display that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened , a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after power restoration, display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or display a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations. It may be configured such that the suggestive display is performed at a relatively early stage. Also, it may be configured not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye) The number of remaining fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 100IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time-saving state, whether it is the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, not only the aspect shown in this example, regardless of whether the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving, to display a common background image may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. can be configured to

If the received effect control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134). , Lighting of the right hitting notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 100IWS645 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 12-24 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the symbol fixing period and the end of the big hit game, if the pending memory is not stored (that is, if the total pending memory number is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 12, a customer waiting demonstration specification command is transmitted.

When the customer-waiting demo designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer-waiting demo designation command, and when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to perform a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period in which the variable display is not performed. At step 105 IWS 251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. 12-25, FIG. 12-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. This is a telop display execution lottery table used when "6" is set.

As shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, it is configured such that the percentage of telop display during customer waiting differs depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of a telop display during customer waiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, it is configured such that the ratio of telop display during customer waiting differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on whether there is a telop display during customer waiting.

12 to 25 show examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 for simplification of explanation, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of tables may be provided. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to execute the telop display (Y of step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to perform telop display with a red rendering mode and a blue rendering mode. At step 105 IWS 253, the effect mode of the telop display is decided by lottery.

FIG. 12-25(C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 12-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened by the production mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the effect mode of the telop display displayed while the customer is waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when 3 minutes elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning (Y in step 105 IWS 255), the effect control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is reproduced (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer are terminated when the effect control command or the like at the time of start-up winning is received.

FIG. 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 12-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C) or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the symbol fixing period has passed, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12. FIG.

Then, 10 seconds pass without receiving any other command such as the production control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the production control board 12, and the telop display of the customer waiting is displayed. When it is decided to carry out, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is decided to display a telop display in a blue rendering mode, a telop display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(B), the border is white). ). Also, when it is decided to display a telop display in the red effect mode, a telop display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(D), a black border is displayed). form).

Then, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command such as the effect control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the effect control board 12, the image display device 5 starts the demonstration. A movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(C) and (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the reproduction of the demonstration movie.

(Prefetching notice setting processing)
FIG. 12-27 is a flow chart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result and a variation pattern is executed. Then, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, prefetching determination etc. to the effect control board 12 is set. done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

In the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), for example, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the effect control CPU 120 provides a effect control command at the time of starting winning (for example, the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of starting winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination ) is received (step 108 IWS 701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the effect control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. And when the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. , the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable display corresponding to the pending memory stored before the relief time reduction, the variable display when the relief time reduction is to be the notice target pre-reading notice effect While it is executable, execution of a look-ahead forewarning effect whose foretelling target is the variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened is restricted. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect straddling the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the time saving, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the time saving is achieved, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and determines the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS 703, each table shown in FIG. 12-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution.

Specifically, when the game state is a state different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (A). However, when the game state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(B).

As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the prediction effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing the big win. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of losing. Therefore, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), the time saving state C is more likely than the game state other than the time saving state C If the display result is off In addition, it is configured so that the proportion of execution of the look-ahead forewarning effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win is not generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest when the big win is not achieved though the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (C) is used to execute If the performance type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed is determined, and the game state is the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (D) is used. Determine the type. Specifically, as the type of effect, either the chance effect or the pending change effect is determined.

The chance eye effect is a variable display to be the target of the look-ahead forewarning effect when the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display to be the target of the foreseeing forewarning effect becomes the chance eye ("778" in this example). It is a production that suggests that will be a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed to encourage whether or not the display result will be the chance eye (“778” in this example). Further, for example, when the chance game effect is executed in the red color effect mode, the red chance game effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when the blue chance game effect is executed in the blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change effect suggests that the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect will be a big hit by displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a performance to do. Further, for example, when the pending change effect is executed in the red effect mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when the pending change effect is executed in the blue effect mode, the blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead preview effect. 12-29, FIGS. 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show a specific example of the chance eye production, and FIGS. 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show a specific holding change production This is an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 12-29 (A1), and then shown in FIGS. As shown, left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (D1), the center decorative pattern stops at either "7" which becomes the chance number "778" or "6" which does not become the chance number "778". is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (E1), when the center decorative symbol "7" is stopped and the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed, a variable display that becomes a big hit is displayed in the reserved memory. It would suggest that there may be a corresponding reserved memory. It should be noted that there may be a case where a pattern (for example, "768") different from the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed after the stimulating effect is executed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning occurs, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a variable display that will result in a big win will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Regarding the pending change effect, it is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 12-29, and at any timing until the new pending display is displayed in the normal mode and then the corresponding pending display and active display are finished. You may make it change to the display mode different from a normal mode.

FIG. 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time-saving state via the big hit and the time-saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 12-30, FIG. 12-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the big hit and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect, and FIG. 12-30 (B) is a time chart. , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 12-30(A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the starting prize is generated until the variable display of the pre-reading target is started , an effect to arouse whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a stimulating effect is included, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display when executing the chance effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed from the timing when the starting prize occurs or the time when the starting prize occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. The display of the suspended display and active display in the post-change display mode is continued until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. That is, when executing the pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the variable display of the prefetch target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance effect and the pending change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) during one variable display, whereas the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

Also, as described above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, ultra-super-shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not performed when the loss is performed, and mainly shortening variation (5 seconds) is performed, but the time-saving state via relief In , ultra-ultrashortening variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed at the time of detachment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-30, it is difficult to ensure the period for executing the chance effect in the time-saving state via relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time saving state via the big hit, both the chance eye effect and the pending change effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance eye production is restricted as the look-ahead notice production, and only the pending change production can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the pre-reading announcement effect according to the game state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (E) is used. , Determine the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, use the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. Determines the type of production of . Specifically, either the red rendering mode or the blue rendering mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect with the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the big hit is more likely to be lost. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect in the red effect mode is higher than in the case of . Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect in the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (E) and (F), in the time-saving state C, it is configured to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win has not occurred for a long time), the deterioration of interest when the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed by the blue performance mode with a low expectation of the big win is suppressed. be able to. In this example, in the time-saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when it is lost, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, it is configured so as not to frequently cause the display result to be incorrect even though the look-ahead foretelling effect is executed in the red effect mode.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 12-28, if it is a time saving state C (that is, if a long-term jackpot does not occur) and if it is not a time saving state C, the pre-reading notice It is possible to vary the execution ratio of effects and the ratio of the type of effects and the mode of effects, thereby improving interest.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the execution of the notice effect is restricted (even if only the notice effect with high expectation is not executed) good), but the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the case of loss The ratio may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution ratio of the type of anticipation with high degree of expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, when a variable display that results in a big hit or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited. good too.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the pre-reading notice effect based on the determined contents (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is decided to execute the chance game effect, in step 108 IWS 704, the chance game flag is set as the execution setting of the chance game effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process, which will be described later, if the chance flag is set, the chance game effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance game effect. The chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the pending change effect, in step 108IWS704, the pending change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining a pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 100IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol for the pseudo-run. , combinations of jackpot patterns that do not reach reach and patterns that are shifted by one pattern) are also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. A combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variable big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (probability variable big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. do. Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates "suddenly variable probability big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "135" decoration symbols (suddenly variable probability big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type. Also, when the execution setting of the chance game effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance game symbols (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance is determined using the notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, the presence or absence of the execution of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(B). Also, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10, the notice effect effect mode is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32 (C). However, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the mode of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(D).

As shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the announcement effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is higher in the case of failure than in the case of failure. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) Compared to the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10), the proportion of executing the notice effect when the display result is wrong is lower. is configured as With this configuration, a predetermined period before the relief time is reduced (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and effect effect described later are performed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a big hit.

In addition, in a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less), the countdown production and effect production described later are executed. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed). is displayed), and the ratio of executing the advance notice performance by the red performance mode is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) If the display result is lost more than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10), the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode. It is configured so that the percentage of With such a configuration, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), although the notice performance is executed in the red performance mode, the interest when it does not become a big hit can suppress the decrease in

In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of notice effects with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the notice effects for types with high expectations for big hits (for example, when the degrees of expectation for big hits are classified into five levels, Only the announcement performance of the type with the fourth stage or higher of the expected degree of jackpot) is restricted to be executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 12-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, when the variable display that results in a big hit or time reduction is executed, the execution of the notice effect is performed. You may make it not restrict.

Also, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio is reduced In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the notice effect in the case of failure, or the notice effect of the type with high expectation The execution ratio may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 until relief time reduction selects a process table including a fanning effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, and 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until the value reaches 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 is determined, for example, by checking whether the EXT data value of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. I can judge.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush effect that notifies control to a time-saving state by relief time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to the time saving state as the relief time saving by the time saving rush performance, and to improve the interest in the time of the relief time saving.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush appearance effect for notifying that the big win will be achieved after executing the effect in the same manner as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS 806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Interest can be improved.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of times of relief time-saving variation is reached, a time-saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative patterns are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, is executed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and to improve the interest.

In addition, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a ready-to-win effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is lost when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a dedicated relief time-saving fluctuation loss-use variation pattern is used, but not limited to such a mode, for example, A variation pattern for losing the same as usual may be used, or a variation pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variation time may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the variation pattern before and when reaching the number of times of variation of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, after the symbol confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and the background image (in this example, orange color (Background image of display color) (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change of the background image is controlled to the time saving state by relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less ( step 108 IWS 807). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 108 IWS 808). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown presentation and effect presentation. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction A process table including countdown presentation and effect presentation corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and the effect presentation are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and effect presentation are always executed. You may make it determine whether. Also, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called false countdown production and effect production (for example, the countdown production and effect production are performed in a common manner) , the countdown presentation and the effect presentation corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but interrupted in the middle (see FIG. 12-42). good too. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown production and effect production (genuine and fake) are better than when it is not 10 times or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance effect is performed (step 108IWS809). If the setting for execution of the chance game effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance game effect (including a chance game effect) (step 108 IWS 810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not performed, the effect that the chance eye symbol is not displayed stop after executing the effect to instigate whether it will be the chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. You may make it decide whether to carry out.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 12-33 and 12-34 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol determination A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS 852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the processing after step 100IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the design decision designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 100IWS857 to shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIG. 12-35 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 100IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time reduction), time reduction loss pattern, big hit pattern) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot including the mode transition effect (effect for notifying the transition to the variable probability state (variable probability mode) and the short time state (short time mode)) and the notification of hitting to the right. (step 100IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speaker 27 as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing pattern (no time saving) or the time saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to variable display start waiting processing. (Step S170) is updated (Step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. As shown in Figure 12-36, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that will be a relief time reduction, the variable display of the special design and decorative design is finished, and the design is removed (no time reduction) When is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time reduction) is determined and displayed for a symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the winning symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the winning symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 100IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and the clarification of the production when switching the game state can be achieved. can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 800 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 800 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of understanding of the player regarding the specifications of the gaming machine with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are stopped and removed (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 12-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

It should be noted that, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B), it shows a case where the inciting production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is executed every 100 fluctuations, but that It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 times to 800 times does not perform the fanning effect, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen. be. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the winning symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844" and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect display 100IW104B in the range according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed. . In this example, as the number of remaining rotations decreases (that is, as the relief time reduction approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number of displayed effects increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), one rotation remains until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, It is assumed that a symbol combination of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 12-38(G), a time-saving rush effect is started to notify that control is to be performed in a time-saving state (relief time-saving), and a time-saving rush effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the control is to be in the time saving state (relief time saving), and to improve the interest in the time saving state (relief time saving).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decoration symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, it is possible to make a notification that is generally performed during the ending period of the first game, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent addiction, or a game machine manufacturer's logo. may be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification in the time-saving rush effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as at the time of notification in the ending period of the first win, or in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may be performed during the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time-saving state by relief time-saving rather than in the time-saving rush performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the game moves to the symbol fixing period, a mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. After that, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed even in the mode transition effect, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39(J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggesting image 100IW 106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1) is operated (depressed) is displayed. be. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 reading "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction is started. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" can be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 12-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that shown in FIG. 12-39(K) based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see Figure 12-8 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the pattern confirmation period) that has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 12-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 12-39 (K) has the same effect as the pseudo holding continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started at the timing of the confirmation display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 12-38(H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush appearance production will be described. FIG. 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rush appearance effect. The example shown in Figure 12-41 follows the example of Figures 12-37(A)-(D).

As shown in FIG. 12-41 (E), one rotation remains until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, "123 ) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F′), the remaining 0 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that the display result is a big hit, although this variable display is for saving time. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, there is no transition to the time-saving state due to the relief time-saving, and the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G′), the time saving rush appearance effect is started, and the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C in the same mode as the time saving rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G′), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the same way as when the time saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the “254” pattern ) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decoration symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the structure of this characterizing part 108IW is also executed to control a jackpot game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the jackpot during the small winning game. In the case of applying to a game machine configured to be able to do so, when the display result of the variable display for saving time is a small hit, the time-saving rush appearance performance is executed to notify the small win. good too.

Next, a description will be given of the so-called fake countdown presentation and effect presentation. FIG. 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the so-called false countdown presentation and effect presentation.

As shown in Figure 12-42 (A) ~ (C), at the time of remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. A countdown from "10" is displayed each time the symbols are stopped after the variable display of the symbols is completed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-42 (A) ~ (C), at the time of remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake effect production is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10. An effect display 100IW 104B having a range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so as to widen the display range (the number of displayed symbols increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed before the display is performed in a manner corresponding to the case where the remaining number of rotations is one until the shift to the relief time reduction. is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the shift to the relief time reduction is not 0, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

As shown in Figure 12-42, when the so-called Gusset countdown production and effect production are configured to be executable, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction It is also possible not to execute the inciting effect suggesting that. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between the genuine article and the counterfeit article.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, when the time saving is lost, the relief time saving counter is initially set to "800". or high-speed variation), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the characteristic portion 108IW described above, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, is set as the symbol determination period, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed during the symbol determination period. Although shown, such processing is not limited. For example, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is provided until the next fluctuation is started, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may Modification 1 will be described below, in which mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed by providing a postponement period until the start of the next variation.

FIG. 12-43 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12-43, in the modified example 1, the special symbol process includes, in addition to the processing shown in FIG. It should be noted that in Modification 1, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the starting winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Also, the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Also, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Also, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Also, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Also, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Also, the process during jackpot opening (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Also, the jackpot opening post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Also, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Also, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In addition, the small hit during opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Also, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. is. In addition, in the modification 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. , differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hitting end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processing of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hitting end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. is similar to

FIG. 12-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in Modification 1. FIG. In Modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17. In modification 1, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts (20 seconds in this example). is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 12-17.

FIG. 12-45 is a flow chart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. FIG. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process is terminated.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (in this example, 20 seconds) shows the case of transitioning to the time saving state at the timing that has passed, such It is not limited to modes. For example, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement process, and to shift to the time saving state at the start of the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification while controlling to the time-saving state, or may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling to the time-saving state. can be considered.

Further, in Modification 1, the case of uniformly measuring 20 seconds as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set "800") at the time of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, when the relief time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction A different postponement period may be set for the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case of the relief time shortening during the normal state, and it is measured in the next variable postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onwards. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Also, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decoration pattern, but displays only the small pattern so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. good too.

In addition, in the modified example 1, the case of extending the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement process when the relief time is shortened is shown, but not only such an aspect, the fluctuation display of the time saving is out may also be applied, and the next fluctuation postponement process similar to that of Modification 1 may be executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started.

In addition, as described above, when the present invention is applied to the time-saving variation display, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the pattern fixing period of the variable display in the case of time saving loss can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal variable display, and the processing related to right-handed notification etc. can be executed in the same process as

FIG. 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12-46, in the modification 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display of the relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is ended, and the When the symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time saving) is fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the lost symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for the same 0.5 second pattern fixing period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern fixing period ends, as shown in FIG. 12-46, the game shifts to the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS114). Then, during the next fluctuation postponement period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period has passed, it is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-46, in the image display device 5, the background image (this In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color).

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the design confirmation period of the lost pattern, and after the symbol confirmation period has passed, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period At the start of the game, four jackpot signals may be output. The 4 jackpot signals here are signals to be externally output during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display pattern confirmation period, which is a relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

Further, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, when the next fluctuation postponement process starts (that is, when the next fluctuation postponement period starts), the player is in a game state assumed to hit right. You may make it output the test signal and external output signal which show, and you may make it start right-handed alerting|reporting. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to hitting to the right and to report hitting to the right at appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to change the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds. Although the case of displaying is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 12-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the above characteristic portion 108IW, after the RAM clearing process (without being a big hit or time saving), 800 times of fluctuation display is executed, or after a big hit or time saving is lost (with the next big hit or time saving) Without distinguishing whether it is a case of executing 800 times of fluctuation display, fluctuation pattern tables F, G (Fig. ) is selected, and the variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown production and effect production, and after being controlled to the time saving state as a relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig. 12-8 (E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, but it is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the modification 2 of FIG. 12-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 times of variation display after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 variations to 1 variation before Also select the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) to perform the same variation display as usual, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time-saving state at the time of passing the big hit, and to perform the variation display of 5 seconds at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, when the 800th variation display is executed after the big hit and the relief time is shortened, the variation is displayed when the 800th variation display is executed. From the pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)), a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) for relief short-time variation failure is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. It should be noted that the characteristic portion 108IW described above is configured to execute the time-saving entry effect during the variable display, and to execute the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification during the pattern fixing period, but for example, during the variable display for 25 seconds (In this case, therefore, 0.5 seconds may be ensured for the pattern fixing period as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clearing process and if the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that will be the relief time is different. In addition, it is possible to make the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state through the relief time saving state different, thereby making the performance different.

Also, for example, as shown in the modification 4 of FIG. 12-47, select the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) even before 10 variations to 1 variation before the relief time is shortened Perform the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when passing through the jackpot Select to perform a 5-second variable display at a high rate, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) in the time-saving state based on the second relief time-saving, and 1.5 seconds high speed It may be configured to perform a variable display of variations.

Next, a game machine according to Example 2 of the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-48 to 12-54. In addition, about Example 2, a part different from Example 1 is mainly demonstrated.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near. Therefore, in the second embodiment, like the variation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table G as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for That is, if the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the tendency of the variation pattern will make the player notice that it is immediately before the relief time reduction. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation display that reduces the relief time is not a dedicated fluctuation pattern for the reduction of the relief time, but a variation pattern that is also used for the variation display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, such as the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I) of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the repair time is shortened and before the repair time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-48 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if you lose), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the fluctuation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the fluctuation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 12-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. 12-7 and 12-8 is determined (step 100IWS 1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer Waiting Demonstration Effect Control Process in Second Embodiment)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 12-26), but the relief depends on whether or not this telop display is executed and the presentation mode. There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time saving or the relief time saving is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer-waiting demonstration designation command, a telop display explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

In addition, even in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed or the mode of presentation. However, in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less) before the relief time is shortened, the execution of the telop display is restricted (for example, the execution ratio is reduced, or not). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image when it becomes a relief time reduction (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised You can give it and improve your interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-49 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count reaches "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(A). Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the effect mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-50 (A) and (B), in any case of the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution, configured to be determined by a common proportion. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when it becomes a relief time reduction and shifts to the time reduction state C, the background image corresponding to the time reduction state C (relief time reduction via the time reduction state) in the image display device 5 (In this example, the background image is displayed in orange) (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the stimulation production according to the remaining variation number until the relief time is shortened, The processing for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the processing for displaying the initial number corresponding to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to execute a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time is shortened. However, in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less) before the relief time is shortened, the execution of the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production is restricted (for example, , lower execution rate, or no execution). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variable display that shortens the relief time is not the dedicated variation pattern for the shortened relief time, but the variation pattern that is also used in the variable display that does not shorten the relief time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in Example 2, the processing for executing the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving rush appearance effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is performed, the change in the background image (that is, notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly performed Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in the second embodiment)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 12-51, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that is a relief time reduction, the special design and the decoration design are displayed. For example, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the game ends, and when the lost pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Then, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see steps 100IWS74 and S75). After the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, it ends, and when the missing pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the missing pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed over the design confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS 1137). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the amusement when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-51, in the period in which the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after shifting to the time saving state C, the right-handed notification is performed (FIG. 12-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a game state of hitting to the right while suppressing the complexity of the performance relating to the transition to the time saving state C, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

(Production example in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 12-52, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (A), when the fluctuation display to be relief time reduction is started and the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B) 2, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing patterns.

Then, when the symbol determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

It should be noted that, when the reserved storage is not stored when the pattern fixing period has passed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In, while switching to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving), the right hitting notification may be performed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations about the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. ) may be performed. In addition, although the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the effect suggesting that the relief time reduction is near is not executed, at an arbitrary timing, a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 12-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and interest. can be improved.

In addition, the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time reduction is established can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the presentation mode until the transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, it may be modified example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 12-53.

(Production example [Modification 1] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Example 2. FIG.

In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is executed to make the effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the blackout state is eliminated as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (D), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 12-53 (C) when the blackout state is eliminated, the image display and the output of the effect sound that notify that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started are performed. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 12-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

(Production example [Modification 2] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the relief time reduction in the modification 2 of the embodiment 2. FIG.

In the modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (A), the variable display that becomes a relief time reduction is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time ( For example, when 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the decorative symbols 100IW100 are temporarily stopped and displayed in combination with the missing symbols on the image display device 5. FIG. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not passed, the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see. executed. In addition, the special figure variation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed in combination with the missing pattern. The time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed during the symbol fixing period.

Then, when the symbol determination period has passed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. It is switched to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state via the relief time saving). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), the notification of hitting to the right is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 12-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

12-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 12-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A), (B) You may be made to perform the explanation (for example, explanation of the production|presentation in relief time reduction function or relief time reduction) regarding time saving. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining variations until the relief variation is 10 or less), the variation pattern to be super reach is determined. , While it is configured to be restricted to decide to execute the notice effect, in the second embodiment, neither is configured to be restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and a notice of a type whose expectation is not very high among the notice effects The production may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of the variation pattern for super reach, and to limit the execution of a type of advance notice effect with a high degree of expectation among the advance notice effects.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the effect (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) that suggests that the relief time is near are produced. Effect production is executed, initial results according to the number of times until relief time reduction and telop display during customer waiting (for example, telop display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 12-26) are displayed. I can't limit it. For example, at an arbitrary timing during the variable display or during the stoppage of the variable display, an action effect to operate the movable body 32, a light emission effect to make the light emitter such as a decorative LED emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), and the movable body 32 , stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc., and the execution frequency and execution mode of vibration effects such as vibrating may suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is near or the relief time is near.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command transmitted when the power is turned on (for example, the effect control command for instructing restoration from power failure and the effect control command for instructing initialization) , If the performance control board 12 side could not receive normally (for example, if the command was missed or the command was garbled), based on the command specifying the game state, the command specifying the variation pattern, etc., normally Although the production of can be executed, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (In addition, once a big hit occurs, it may be executed be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command that specify the number of times of variation until relief time reduction (in this example, sent each time a variable display is performed ) can not be received normally, the remedy suggesting effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggesting performance may not be executed only during the variable display in which the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1 or the command for the number of times of relief time 2 is not normally received, or the relief suggestion performance may not be executed until the next big hit occurs. You may make it not perform suggestion production. Also, for example, if it is not possible to receive normally, the relief suggestion performance is executed in a production mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will be a relief time reduction is large (that is, it is not close to a relief time reduction). may With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive presentation.

Moreover, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above show the case of application to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on the variation display result, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a game machine configured to be able to execute a role game that controls a big win game based on the fact that a game ball wins a prize (V win) in a specific area (V prize area) in the accessory during a small win game, You may apply the structure controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown by characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, switch the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter to "800" or "900" depending on whether it is during RAM clear processing execution or when the big hit occurs, or randomly set the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter You may switch to "800" or "900."

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set each time the relief time saving occurs, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has moved again may differ from the time saving flag (third value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example shown above, the case of making different effects (variation patterns) between the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be provided in the time saving state after the big hit and in the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification is made just before the end of the time saving state after the big hit and just before the start of the relief time saving (notification of Figure 12-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) good.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where different productions (variation patterns) are made in the time saving state and the relief time saving state are shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is good also as the same production (variation pattern) in the time saving state and relief time saving out of time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification of Figure 12-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed just before the end of the time saving state and just before the start of the relief time saving good.

As described above, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1A) to (means 8A) shown below.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, game control Part for executing steps 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 part to be executed), predetermined suggestive effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2) background image changes, blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C), etc.) Effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS 638), and the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established (for example, FIG. 12 - As shown in 44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. 12-50). According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is started. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is made difficult to see (for example, it is blacked out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition ends. , blacked out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is an aspect of changing the background display in the means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is performed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2 ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), explanations are given using telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to 5A, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable pattern shown in FIGS. 12-48). part for executing setting processing), and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation )), and the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the missing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step a portion for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer and a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. a buffer), backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped and pending information stored by the pending storage means, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) to initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, and when the power supply is started, the backup storage Restoration means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control through the initialization process, a power failure occurs in a situation in which the pending memory corresponding to the special number of times of variable display is stored before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can be specified to be controlled in a special state; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time-saving counter) capable of specifying the number of times variable display is performed in a state; special state information and execution count information even when power supply is stopped; Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and initialization means (for example, game control and a portion where the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means holds the special status information, the number of times of execution information, and the numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving counter are initialized On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set)). According to such a configuration, intentional initialization of the numerical information can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and a variable than the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern with a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) Pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variably displayed When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable The display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result (for example, FIG. 12-7 ( A) , (B), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of loss) , when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the variation pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are higher than the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the percentage determined in the case of a big hit), before the special condition is established In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 12-8 (F)). , (G), just before the relief time is shortened, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B, the suggesting effect executing means is provided which can execute a suggesting effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display while waiting for customers), and the suggesting effect executing means During the predetermined period before the special condition is established, the rate of execution of the suggested effect is higher than during the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 ∼ S809, and the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can expect the establishment of the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in Figs. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any one of means 1B to 3B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display can be executed When is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than when it is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less period) is lower than the period before the predetermined period, the rate at which the announcement effect is executed when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31 , the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 5B) In any one of means 1B to 4B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, the advance notice effect executing means performs a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the proportion of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) than the period before the predetermined period (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode during the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including rushing and losing)) and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-17 ), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, in FIG. 12-13 As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. In (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 108IWS1701A, S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), a special variable When the variable display by the display pattern is being executed, a specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, for game control The portion of microcomputer 100 that executes step 108IWS806B. 12-38 (G), (H)) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means executes a specific notification effect when a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display satisfying the special condition is executed, and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the production in the same mode as the specific notification production is executed. Special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 12- 41 (G'), see (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display that satisfies a special condition is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is established. A predetermined notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, a full rotation effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed according to a mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or 2C, when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode is the same as before the special condition is met. Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result is derived and displayed by pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met. Display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) longer than (for example, as shown in Figure 12-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135. See Figure 12-36), the special condition is established In the display period of the display result of the variable display when the As shown, the effect control CPU 120 has a portion for executing step 100IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period , and after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 12-18). According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIG. ), output a special signal. According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 8C) In any one of means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, a left-handed path) can pass ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special path (for example, a right-handed path) can pass, and a variable display of identification information, the second Variable display execution means (for example, game control (the part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be shot toward the special path (for example, in a game state where the player is assumed to hit right a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game medium The second start condition is established when the game medium passes through the second passage area, and the special output means provides a display result of the variable display when the special condition is established. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output capable of specifying that the game media should be shot toward the special path at an appropriate timing.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns Display pattern determination means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variable When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the execution number of displays, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is established, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is established. After the non-specific display result (e.g., lost pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special notification effect (e.g., a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction ( orange)) can be executed Special information effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is established. In addition, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a reserve storage means (for example, a first reserve memory number buffer or a second reserve memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserve information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met; a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a pending change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means, wherein the pre-reading notice execution means is Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, the variable display when the special condition is established can be executed as an announcement target, while the variable that the special condition is established can be executed. Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect with the variable display after the display as the forewarning target is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed. is a mode for changing the background display on the display means to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 12-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest, and prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any one of means 1D to 3D, there is provided suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects, effect effects, telop display during customer waiting, etc.). The suggestive effect executing means restricts the execution of the suggestive effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, explanation effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B) is provided). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1E) to (means 4E) shown below is disclosed in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and from the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including shortened variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) whose variable display periods are shortened (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is , It is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in 100, step 100IWS170, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed The variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A high ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the specific display result is obtained (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. Figure 12-7 (C), Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate of execution of the variable display by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated based on updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of reach production (For example, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) (for example, for game control A portion where the microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more unspecified in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern in the case of the display result is low (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figures 12-7 (C) and 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the display result of the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern is less likely to be the non-specific display result, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, step 100IWS634, S638 in the effect control CPU120 portion) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or 2E, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112 and a pending memory means (for example, a first pending memory number buffer or a second pending memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and a pre-reading notice execution means. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and the ratio of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and any of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice The ratio of whether to execute the production is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and execution type of the foreseeing advance notice effect are determined in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. It can be different, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, variable display executing means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer or a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. buffer), and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, The pre-reading notice execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display when the special condition is established among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is established is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. And update the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part) characterized by do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In this example, the initial value is set to the relief time-saving number counter when a big hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots with no time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with second special symbols, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set. It may be configured as

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design mainly fluctuates is shown in a normal state, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased to vary both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established on the basis that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession ( For example, for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in Figure 12-17, the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state) (for example, FIG. 12 As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again. Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

It should be noted that, in this example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state) shows the case of updating the relief time reduction number counter, such It is not limited to modes. For example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), high probability low base (latency probability change) update the relief time reduction counter in all four states It may be configured as In this case, it can also be applied to a game machine that executes a drop lottery to the normal state in the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, the case of preferentially digesting the second special symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first start winning hole, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) is provided for frequent small hits, the game balls are digested in order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are provided is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any one of means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS135, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-17). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) may have been According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 12 -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, the game (the part that executes step 100 IWS 167 in the control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) In means 4a, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to the initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 12-47 The part shown in Example 4) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state has not been controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 10a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 12-47 It may be configured as shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, a gaming machine controllable to a jackpot game state), in which a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path); Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game necessary for executing multiple types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) for updating the data value indicating the progress state and executing the process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 2, a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 part for executing S110 to S113), the data value is the first When the second numerical value is different from the numerical value, the second processing regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the first When the third numerical value is different from the numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes the third processing for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the game control part of the microcomputer 100 for execution of step 100 and IWS 114), the game is played by shooting the game medium along the first path in the normal state, and the game is played by shooting the game medium along the second path in the special state. and a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 12-46) for executing launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during execution of the third process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means that can update numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control and advantageous state control A data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a plurality of types of processing including processing execution means for executing processing corresponding to the data value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, game control and a part for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. Controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS 172 and step 100IWS 173), the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes the second processing related to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, FIG. 5, a game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. 3 to execute the process (for example, as shown in Figure 12-43, the part that executes the step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), notification to notify that it is controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process It is characterized by having a performance execution means (see FIG. 12-46) for executing performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In addition, in this example, the case of giving priority to the processing related to the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, priority may be given to the processing related to variable display and the processing related to relief time reduction.

In this example, a case is shown in which the right stroke is notified in the next fluctuation postponing process, which is the third process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that only the mode transition effect suggesting transition to the time-saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display satisfying the special condition ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, 1b-2 or 2b, the updating means updates numerical information when variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, game control The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the microcomputer 100), the processing executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 12 -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100), special information performs different processing when it is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-14, it may be configured as a part for executing step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determining means determines different variable display patterns depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 100IWS1714 (the part that executes According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern in which the determination time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) shown below is disclosed in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1c) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means and a state information control means for controlling identifiable state information, wherein the state control means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and then to the special state. Controllable (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-12), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17 2, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the update means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed Numerical information in (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, neither the time saving flag A nor C is set, and the data corresponding to each is "0" ), the state information is set to the second numerical value (for example, in FIG. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), based on the establishment of the special condition When it is controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIGS. That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case of the second numerical value and the case of the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 12-10, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS540, and the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-17). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In addition, although the case where the time saving state A designation|designated command and the time saving state C designation|designated command were transmitted was shown in this example as specific information, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the background designation command and the variation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that can identify the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. good too. In addition, for example, when a big win is achieved, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes according to the game state, and depending on which command is received. The fanfare period and the ending period may be changed.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the It may be configured to use a fourth numerical value different from the three numerical values (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a different effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any one of means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means When the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the condition, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, the state control means, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed When the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform steps 100IWS 636, (the part that executes S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means Common when the state control means controls to the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition It may be configured to be able to execute effects (for example, effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means that can update numerical information based on that (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply When it is stopped, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of the variable display; It is possible to control to a special state when the condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17 , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means controls predetermined information when power supply is started. means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means receives the predetermined information, power supply (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, a part that executes step 100IWS630 in the production control CPU 120). do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect by changing the background, effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and display on a demo screen or menu screen.

It should be noted that when a command (S9 in FIG. 12-12) specifying initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time reduction as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started (for example, As shown in 12-11, it may be configured as a part for executing step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, a player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, which increases the operation rate of the game machine and suppresses an increase in the processing load.

In addition, although the case where the command which can specify the value of a relief time reduction counter is shown at the time of restoration is shown in this example, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in units of 100 rotations, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, . . . 500 to 599 rotations can be specified. Although the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but 127 or less may be configured to transmit an identifiable command.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition based on the specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120), as the specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times of variable display execution and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. 1st specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, relief time reduction number 1 designation command), the difference between the number of execution times of variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value Second specific information that can be specified And, (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to appropriately implement the processing relating to the specific information.

In addition, in this example, the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value shows the case of transmitting the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command which is the second specific information, such a mode not limited to For example, when the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, it may be configured not to transmit the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command, which is the second specific information.

(Means 4d) In any one of means 1d to 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display for a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120, FIG. 12-39 (I) to FIG. 12-40 (M )), and every time the variable display is performed a second predetermined number of times, which is less than the first predetermined number of times, before the special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) to 12-38(F)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to a player, the risk of unknowingly losing money can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, although the case where production|presentation is performed based on the count value of a relief time reduction counter is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 12-17 As shown, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS172, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when it is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup memory means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition; It is characterized by executing different effects (for example, parts shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 12-17 As shown, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS172, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when it is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state are different. It is characterized by executing effects (for example, portions shown in modified examples 2 and 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after clearing the RAM, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to use a plurality of variation pattern tables as in the case after the big hit.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is a variable display. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the above, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is the special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed. When the special condition is satisfied by the corresponding specific value, the update means can be controlled to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated in each case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states, including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state , the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after the definite variable time reduction is a normal jackpot , and the relief time saving state is made higher than the time saving state after the normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled to reduce the relief time when controlled to a big hit based on the first special pattern and when controlled to a big hit based on the second special pattern. may be configured so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to a disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1"), the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time is less than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (e.g. "6"). Then, the advantage in the saving working hours is set higher than the advantage in the saving working hours after the big hit. It should be noted that those who are set to disadvantageous settings (e.g. "1") have a higher relief time-saving arrival rate than those set to advantageous setting values (e.g. "6"), and relief time-saving is always time-saving Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big win (for example, the number of times of time saving is 100 times after the normal big win).

(Means 4f) In any one of means 1f to 3f, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any one of means 1f to 4f, when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f, for example, when a big win occurs with the first special symbol and when a big win occurs with the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of means 1f to 5f, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to 6f, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any one of means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8f, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a state; an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display; a variable display executing means capable of executing variable display based on the following; a holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information when the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met; and power supply is stopped. backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and pending information when the power supply is started; recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means and the hold information stored by the hold storage means when the state control means , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, so that when the special condition is established, the special state can be controlled, and after the restoration control is executed , when the special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can control to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the second identification information is displayed. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player while optimizing the control by the initialization.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization process, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when the power is restored The relief time-saving counter and the pending memory are restored, and when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th variation and the condition for the relief time-saving control is established, the relief time-saving control is enabled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and the variation that becomes the condition for the relief time reduction control when the big win is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the big win is controlled based on the second special pattern. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In means 1g or 2g, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to an unfavorable setting (eg "1"), it will reduce the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (eg "6"). is higher than the advantage of the time-saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1") is more likely to be lost than the advantageous setting (e.g. "6"), so it is easier to save time. , Since the relief time reduction is always 800 times of time reduction (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time reduction state via the big win (for example, the number of time reduction is usually 100 times after the big win). good too.

(Means 4b) In any one of means 1g to 3g, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any one of means 1g to 4g, when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g, for example, when a big win occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of means 1g to 5g, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of means 1g to 6g, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any one of means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8g, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, and the updating means is a variable of the first identification information Further comprising a suggestive effect executing means capable of updating the numerical information when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and executing a suggestive effect related to establishment of the special condition, wherein the suggestive effect is provided. The execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes to execute the suggestive presentation in accordance with the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation suggests a period until the special condition is established. It is an aspect to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown production in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the mode of presentation.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode that can specify the number of execution times of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode suggesting the number of fluctuations as a condition for the relief time saving control.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is a effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and displayed in any mode. The period until the implied special condition is established differs depending on whether the According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the mode of the specific image.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers and the mode of presentation using, for example, a table shown in FIG. 12-25. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ according to the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any one of means 1h to 3h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25, for example.

(Means 5h) In any one of means 1h to 4h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration that determines the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting using the table shown in FIG. 12-25, for example.

(Means 6h) In any one of means 1h to 5h, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the start condition being satisfied and the starting condition being satisfied; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means detects at least one of the operation of the operating means and the passage of a game medium through a predetermined area while the predetermined image is displayed. Based on what has been done, a suggestive effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 6h, for example, when the game machine is shifted to the demonstration state, the game ball is operated by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the start port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which setting value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

Note that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 7h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 8h) In any one of means 1h to 7h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 8h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to execute a telop display during customer waiting and the mode of presentation using the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 9h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; A setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect to suggest is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect depending on which set value is set. The effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), the telop display during customer waiting is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(means 10h) in any one of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value, wherein the setting suggestion effect execution means performs a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner according to which setting value is set. The execution ratio differs, and the suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect according to the specific mode regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), even if any set value is set, the customer is waiting in a red effect mode. may be configured so that the execution ratio of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any one of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive effect execution means is configured so that when the power supply is started and the initialization process is executed and when the recovery process is executed, the power supply is stopped. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display during customer waiting and the countdown effect is different after the initialization process and after the power is restored. It should be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) Any one of means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, wherein the variable display pattern determination means When the condition is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is established, the special state is entered when the special variable display pattern is not determined and the variable display is executed by the special variable display pattern. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying that the game is to be controlled. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 12h is based on a configuration using, for example, a relief time-saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 12-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any one of means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determination means is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. When the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is higher than the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the previous period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 13h is based on the configuration using the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) In any one of means 1h to 13h, there is provided a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means can execute the advance notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable display than the period before the predetermined period. When the result does not result in a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-32.

(Means 15h) In any one of means 1h to 14h, there is provided a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means is capable of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result, and the display of the variable display. When the result is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect mode by using the table shown in FIG. 12-32, for example.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and being controllable to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
sound output means;
display means;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
light emitting means;
state control means capable of controlling a first state and a second state having different degrees of advantage;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
with
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
The specific production is
The display means displays a moving image, the sound output means outputs a sound effect, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period, in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is notified as a result of the production. including
The production executing means is
In the first period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed,
In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed,
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means emits light at an interval shorter than that in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
The state control means is capable of controlling from the first state to the second state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times,
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an information effect to operate information display related to the game,
In the first period and the second period, the operation speed of the information display in the information presentation does not change,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a static effect of displaying a still image of the effect moving image that is made still after displaying the effect moving image that progresses at the second speed in the second period,
There are a plurality of production modes of the static production,
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which effect mode the static effect is.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images